Samsung | YP-D1Z | Samsung YP-D1V راهنمای کاربری

‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ‪Ogg, Audio ASF, WMA, MP3‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ Ogg, Audio ASF, WMA, MP3‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Multimedia Studio‬ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪MP3‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ ،CDs‬ﻛﺎﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
Document1
1/10/06 10:35 AM
Page 1
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍ‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝﻫﺎ‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪۱۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪۱۴‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪۱۶‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺧﻄﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﺪ‪۱۶ .‬‬
‫‪۱۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪۲۰‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫‪۲۳‬‬
‫‪Multimedia Studio‬‬
‫‪۲۳‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪۲۵‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ )‪(Folder‬‬
‫‪۲۸‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ‬
‫‪۲۹‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪۳۰‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﻙﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻲﺩﻱ ‪Audio‬‬
‫‪۳۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫‪۳۲‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫‪۳۳‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ‪Multimedia Studio‬‬
‫‪۳۵‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪۳۶‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫‪۳۷‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫‪۳۹‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫‪۴۱‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ‪Multimedia Studio‬‬
‫‪۴۲‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪۴۲‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪۴۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺚ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪۴۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪۴۲‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪Hold‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﻙﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﻙﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺎﺯ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪MP۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻮﻙ ﻣﺎﺭﻙ )ﻧﺸﺎﻥ(‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Navi‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ FM‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺝ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪۴۳‬‬
‫‪۴۳‬‬
‫‪۴۳‬‬
‫‪۴۳‬‬
‫‪۴۴‬‬
‫‪۴۵‬‬
‫‪۴۶‬‬
‫‪۴۷‬‬
‫‪۴۷‬‬
‫‪۴۷‬‬
‫‪۴۸‬‬
‫‪۴۸‬‬
‫‪۴۹‬‬
‫‪۵۰‬‬
‫‪۵۱‬‬
‫‪۵۲‬‬
‫‪۵۳‬‬
‫‪۵۳‬‬
‫‪۵۳‬‬
‫‪۵۳‬‬
‫‪۵۴‬‬
‫‪۵۴‬‬
‫‪۵۴‬‬
‫‪۵۴‬‬
‫‪۵۵‬‬
‫‪۵۵‬‬
‫‪۵۶‬‬
‫‪۵۶‬‬
‫‪۵۷‬‬
‫‪۵۸‬‬
‫‪۵۸‬‬
‫‪۵۸‬‬
‫‪۵۸‬‬
‫‪۵۹‬‬
‫‪۶۰‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪۶۰‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻲ ‪Slide Show‬‬
‫‪۶۰‬‬
‫‪ZOOM‬‬
‫‪۶۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪۶۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫‪۶۱‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪۶۲‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫‪۶۳‬‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫‪۶۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫‪۶۵‬‬
‫‪BURST‬‬
‫‪۶۶‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫‪۶۶‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪۶۶‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪۶۷‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫‪۶۷‬‬
‫‪) Resolution‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ(‬
‫‪۶۸‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫‪۶۹‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ‪۷۰ Video Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪۷۰‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫‪۷۰‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪۷۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪۷۱‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫‪۷۲‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫‪۷۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪۷۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪۷۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪۷۴‬‬
‫‪۷۴‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪۷۵‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫‪۷۵‬‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪YPD1–USB‬‬
‫‪۷۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫‪۷۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪۷۷‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫‪۷۸‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﻲ‪/‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻛﻮﻻﻳﺰﺭ )‪ (EQ‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺖ )‪(Bit Rate‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻚ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ )‪(Auto Sync‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ )‪(Scroll Speed‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ )‪(Text Viewer Color‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺖ )‪(Backlight Time‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﻜﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻮﺭ )‪(Clock Screen Saver‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻋﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۷۸‬‬
‫‪۷۹‬‬
‫‪۷۹‬‬
‫‪۸۰‬‬
‫‪۸۰‬‬
‫‪۸۱‬‬
‫‪۸۱‬‬
‫‪۸۲‬‬
‫‪۸۲‬‬
‫‪۸۲‬‬
‫‪۸۳‬‬
‫‪۸۳‬‬
‫‪۸۳‬‬
‫‪۸۳‬‬
‫‪۸۴‬‬
‫‪۸۴‬‬
‫‪۸۴‬‬
‫‪۸۴‬‬
‫‪۸۵‬‬
‫‪۸۵‬‬
‫‪۸۵‬‬
‫‪۸۶‬‬
‫‪۸۷‬‬
‫‪۸۷‬‬
‫‪۸۷‬‬
‫‪۸۸‬‬
‫‪۸۹‬‬
‫‪۸۹‬‬
‫‪۸۹‬‬
‫‪۹۰‬‬
‫‪۹۰‬‬
‫‪۹۱‬‬
‫‪۹۲‬‬
‫‪۹۴‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﴼ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ‪ ۳۵‬ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ۲۵‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻇﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﻳﺰﺍﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻴﻨﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭﮊﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺧﻴﺲ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫¬ ﻟﻄﻔﴼ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻻﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﺩﻭﭼﺮﺧﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻑ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪﺁﻓﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺵﻫﺎﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺰﺷﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﺘﺎﻥ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻣﻲﺯﻧﺪ )ﺯﻳﻨﮓ ﺯﻳﻨﮓ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ( ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻮﺍﻇﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺭﺯﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻭﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻲﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‪ ۵ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۳۵‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ۴۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۹۵‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪ l‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ‪ ۱۰ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪٪۷۵‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻮﺍ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻠﻲ ﺍﺗﻴﻠﻦ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺩﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪Line-in‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻲﺩﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭﮊﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪YP-D1 V‬‬
‫‪YP-D1 X‬‬
‫‪YP-D1 Z‬‬
‫‪YP-D1 Q‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ ۲۵۶‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ۵۱۲‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺿﻤﺎﺋﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻚ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻼﺏ ﺑﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻜﺚ‪/‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﺞ ‪HOLD‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ‪/‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻜﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺟﻚ ‪ENC‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪F.M‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺮﺍﻙﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ‪EQ/DNSe‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﻣﻜﺚ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻙ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭙﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭﮊﺭ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺷﺎﺭﮊﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫¬ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪Fully Charge‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫¬ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫¬ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﴼ ‪ ۸‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭﮊﺭ ‪ ۲‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺳﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻳﻖﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﺎﺭﮊﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭﮊﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺷﺎﺭﮊﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۱۲‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺒﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺷﺎﺭﮊﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ‬‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﺗﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺧﻴﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﺭﮊﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﭘﻨﺘﻴﻮﻡ ‪ ۲۰۰‬ﻣﻜﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ‪98SE، ME/2000/XP‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺻﺪ ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺳﻲﺩﻱﺭﺍﻡ )ﺩﺍﺑﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ(‬
‫‪ l‬ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ USB‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ ،DirectX‬ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ‪ ۹‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ‪ ،98SE‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ‪ ،USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ‪ XP ،ME‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ،2000‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ‪ USB‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫”ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ”(۱۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ CD - ۲‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻲﺩﻱ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ]‪ [Install Win98 USB Driver‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۴‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ‪ USB‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “‪ ”Samsung YP-D1 USB Device‬ﺩﺭ ‪Device Manager‬‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
.‫ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ‬USB ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ‬
:98SE/ME ‫ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
Control Panel→ System→ Device Manager→Disk Drivers → Samsung YP-D1
Control Panel→System→Haldware→Device Manager→Disk drivers→
Samsung YP-D1 USB Device
:XP 2000 ‫ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬
.‫ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬USB ‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ‬- ۵
١٥
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺧﻄﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Device Manager - ۱‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ‪98SE‬‬
‫‪Control panel→ System→ Device Manager‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻝ ﺩﺍﺑﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۴‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ )‪ (Update Driver‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺭﻭﺵﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﻓﺮﻕ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺎ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻜﺮﺭﴽ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ‬‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪...‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪[CD-ROM]\Win98USB\Drivers‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ )ﻛﭙﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ Explorer‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﺍﻛﺴﭙﻠﻮﺭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻛﺴﭙﻠﻮﺭﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ )‪ (Removable disk‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ ،Music‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ ،text‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫‪ PHOTO‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ‪ SVI‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ Video‬ﻛﭙﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ SVI‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ‪ Multimedia Studio‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﺍﻛﺴﭙﻠﻮﺭﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬‫ﻓﺮﻕ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ )‪ (Stop‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫)‪ (Stop Hardware Device‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺸﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫‪ Media Studio‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﺋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺳﻲﺩﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺳﻲﺩﻱ ﺭﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Install Samsng Media‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ )ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ( ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻﮒ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ )‪Multimedia‬‬‫‪ (Studio‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ‪ ۲۰۰۰‬ﻭ ‪ XP‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪...‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪ Media Studio‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Samsung Media Stadio‬ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Desktop‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻴﺰﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Media Stadio‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Device] → [Show Device Windows‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Library‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ )ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ(‬
‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪...‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ]‪ [Transfer‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻞﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Help‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ]‪ [Add Playlist] → [File‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ]‪ [Library‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪...‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫‪ - ۴‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۵‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫]‪[Transmit‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ Music‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ]‪ [Play list‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ]‪[Add‬‬‫ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ]‪[Delete‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ‪ Help‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺯﻳﻚ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ )‪(Folder‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [Create Folder‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Help‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ]‪ [Delete‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Confirm Deletion‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺸﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Confirm‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Help‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ‬‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Device] → [Format‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Format‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Start‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Help‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﻙﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CD‬ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﻙﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻲﺩﻱ ‪Audio‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺳﻲﺩﻱ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﻙﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺳﻲﺩﻱ ﺭﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ]‪ [Search Audio CD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺮﺍﻙﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻲﺩﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺗﺮﺍﻙﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ripa CD‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫]‪ [ Tools] →[Audio Source Conversion Settings‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Help‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Upload‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ]‪ [OK‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ) ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ( ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺰﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫]‪ [Tools] → [Setting‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Help‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Help‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Help‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﮊﻱ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﺳﻨﻮﺕ ﻭ ‪ CDBB‬ﮔﺮﺍﺳﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ CDDB‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﺍﺳﻨﻮﺕ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻮﮔﻮﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﺳﻨﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﮔﻮﻱ ‪ CDDB‬ﮔﺮﺍﺳﻨﻮﺕ‬‫ﻭ ﻟﻮﮔﻮ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ‪ CDDB‬ﮔﺮﺍﺳﻨﻮﺕ ﻭ ﻟﻮﮔﻮﻱ “ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ‪ CDDB‬ﮔﺮﺍﺳﻨﻮﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﺳﻨﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﮔﺮﺍﺳﻨﻮﺕ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ‪Multimedia Studio‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻡ‪ Multimedia Studio‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ‪ Multimedia Studio‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺳﻲﺩﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺳﻲﺩﻱ ﺭﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Install Multimedia Studio‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ )ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ( ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻﮒ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ‬‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ )‪ (Multimedia Studio‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬
‫‪ ۲۰۰۰‬ﻭ ‪ XP‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪...‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ‪Multimedia Studio‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪Multimedia Studio‬‬
‫‪ Multimedia Studio l‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﺰﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻛﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ‪ Multimedia Studio‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ]‪ [Review Image‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ]‪ [Edit Img‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ]‪ [Picture Editor‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﭗ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺸﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Help‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪Multimedia Studio‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Multimedia Studio‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [File] → [Export Image to Device‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۴‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ]‪Select‬‬
‫‪ [Device‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ]‪ [OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۵‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ]‪ [Resize Image‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ]‪ [Photo‬ﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ ۱۲۸×۱۶۰‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﴼ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ‬‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬‫]‪[File]→[Delete Image From Device‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ]‪ [Help‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪Multimedia Studio‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ‪ Multimedia Studio‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [File] →[Export video to device‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۴‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ]‪ [Select device‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪...‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪Multimedia Studio‬‬
‫‪ - ۵‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [Convert‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۶‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ SVI‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ]‪ [Video‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ p‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ‪ Directx 9.0‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ‪ MediaPlayer 9.0‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ‪ Unified Codec Pack‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪File→ Delete video from device‬‬‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Help‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪Multimedia Studio‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Multimedia Studio‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ‪ YP-D1‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ]‪ [Capture‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪Multimedia‬‬
‫‪ Studio‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ Media‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Menu→Open‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪...‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪Multimedia Studio‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ  ]‪ [Capture‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‚ ]‪ [Capture‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۴‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Save‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Save as‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻛﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Save‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﻭ ‪Codec‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻲ‬‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ‪Codec‬ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Help‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ‪Multimedia Studio‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Multimedia Studio‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Help‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Help‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﻲﻫﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ :‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ :‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫را ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺚ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻜﺚ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﺍﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ + ، -‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ 00‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 40‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۰۰‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴۰‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪Hold‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Hold‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ “‪ ”Hold‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ‪ Setting‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ Language‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ‪ WMA‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ kbps۴۸‬ﺗﺎ ‪ kbps۱۹۲‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۸۳‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﻙﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﻙﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺎﺯ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪/‬ﭘﺎﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ :VBR‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﮔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺑﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪،‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ VBR‬ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ‬‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ MP2‬ﻭ ‪ MP1‬ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ MP3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱﺣﻠﻘﻪﺍﻱﻛﻪﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪﺁﻥﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ A↔B‬ﺭﺍ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ↔‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ A↔B‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ A↔B‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻣﻜﺮﺭﴽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ A↔B‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪001‬٭٭٭٭‪ V‬ﻭ ‪002‬٭٭٭٭‪V‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺩﺭ ]‪[Voice]→[Recorded‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Yes‬ﻳﺎ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ]‪ [Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ FM‬ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪MP3‬‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫‪ ENC‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪ L001‬ﻭ ‪ L002‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫‪ Recorded→Line‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۴‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Yes‬ﻳﺎ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Yes‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ kbps ۳۳‬ﺗﺎ ‪ kbps ۱۹۲‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ ﺑﻴﭗ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ )‪ (Line in‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ، Navi‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ +،-‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻮﻙ ﻣﺎﺭﻙ )ﻧﺸﺎﻥ(‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Bookmark‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Move‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Delete‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ]‪ [Bookmark] →[Navi Botton Mode‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ۵۰‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Playlist‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Navi‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ‪ Setting Playlist‬ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۵۲‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Play Mode‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﻤﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ‪:۱‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻲ ﻫﻤﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﺍﻙﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ )‪ (MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ‪ DNSe‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Equalizer‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫→ ‪3D-User → 3D-Studio → 3D-Stage→ 3D-Club → Normal → Rock → House‬‬
‫‪Dance → Jazz → Ballad → Rhythm & Blues → Classical → User EQ‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Navi‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Navi Button mode‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Effect‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺯﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Effect‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Effect screen 1,2,3 → EQ screen‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪Normal‬‬
‫‪→ Reapeat Folder‬‬
‫‪→ Repeat ALL‬‬
‫→‬
‫‪Repeat 1‬‬
‫‪→ Shuffle Folder‬‬
‫‪→ Shuffle All‬‬
‫‪→ Intro‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ “‪ ”I‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Navigation‬ﻭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺮﻑ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﺍﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻛﻨﺴﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Navigation‬ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬ﻡ‪: List‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Navigation‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫‬‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ‬
‫‬‫ ‪ -‬ﻭ ‪ : +‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬‫ ‪ : NAVI‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬‫‪l‬ﻡ‪ :Thumbnail/Preview‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Navigation‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ‪ Preview‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Thumbnail‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ) ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪( Thumbnail‬‬
‫‬‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(Preview‬‬
‫ ‪ -‬ﻭ ‪ : +‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬‫‪ : NAVI‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺮﻑ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﺍﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺴﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ A↔B‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﺩﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ]‪ [Playlist] → [MYLIST‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ‪ MYLIST‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ A↔B‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ FM‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺩﻛﻤﺔ‬‫ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺝ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ FM ،‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻛﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‪ :‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ‪ FM‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺴﺎﻣﺪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ‪ FM‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪ F××××001‬ﻭ ‪ F××××002‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫‪ MP3‬ﺩﺭ ‪ Rcorded/ FM‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺸﺖ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Yes‬ﻳﺎ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Yes‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ ﺑﻴﭗ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪ FM‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ‪ kbps ۶۴‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ‪ FM‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۳۰‬ﻣﻮﺝ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ FM‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Add to Preset‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻮﺝ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ FM‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Auto preset‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻮﺝﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ FM‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ FM‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ]‪ [Delete Preset‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ FM‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ‪ FM Region‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ‪ FM Region‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻛﺮﻩ‪/‬ﺍﻳﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ‪ :‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ‪ FM‬ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ۵/۸۷‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۱۰۸‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﮊﺍﭘﻦ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺝ ‪ FM‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ۵۶‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۱۰۸‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺝ ‪ FM‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ۸۷/۵‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۱۰۸‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ‪۵۰‬‬
‫ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ FM‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﻕ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ FM‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ‪ FM Search level‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ FM‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ‪ ،FM‬ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪High → Middle → Low l‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ FM‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ]‪ [Timer FM Rec‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ +‬ﻳﺎ – ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ OFF‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺭﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺝ ‪ FM‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ - ۴‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ Timer Rec‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Yes‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ‪ Timer Recording‬ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ Timer Rec‬ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ txt‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺭﻭﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‪l‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ : + ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Bookmark‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Move‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Delete‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Text Viewer‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ : + ، -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫‬‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ Menu‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ ۱۶۰×۱۲۸‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﺸﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ‪ Multimedia Studio‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۲۵‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Multimedia‬‬‫‪ Studio‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻲ ‪Slide Show‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Start Slide Show‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Fast‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [Slow‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻜﺲﻫﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻲﺩﺭﭘﻲ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲﺗﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ZOOM‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Zoom‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ – ﻭ ‪ +‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬ﻡ ‪ ) ٪۱۰۰‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ( → ‪. (×۴) ٪۴۰۰ → (×۲ ) ٪۲۰۰‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫–‪+،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪ Zoom‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Photo Adj.l‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺍﺯ – ﻭ ‪ +‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ Item‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬ﻡ ‪ : Brightness‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ -۴‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ، ۴‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬ﻡ‪ : Saturation‬ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ -۴‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ، ۴‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Image Filters‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺍﺯ ‪ +‬ﻭ – ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬ﻡ ‪Normal → Sharpen → Sepia → Emboss → Blur → Asphalt → Painting → Fusain‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Navi‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ : + ، -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫‬‫ﻳﺎ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ(‬
‫‬‫ ‪ :Menu‬ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ،Menu‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ‪ SVI‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪Multimedia Studio‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ‪ SMF‬ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪ Multimedia Studio‬ﺁﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ‬
‫»‪ «sending file‬ﺍﺯ »‪ «Using Multimedia studio‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۳۷‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ‪ Camera‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Still Camera‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Camera Standby‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻮﮊﻩ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : + ، - l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ ) Zoom‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ (‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪ - ۴‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ]‪ [Photo] → [ALBUM‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻮﮊﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻜﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺣﺲﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻮﮊﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﻮﮊﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺍﺑﺮﻱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻜﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻜﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻇﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ‪ ،Shutter‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻜﺲﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ ۵۰‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Video Camera‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ، NAVI‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪BURST‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Burst‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪NAVI‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ، Camera Standby‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ‪ ،‬ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Self Timer‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﺎ ‪ – ، +‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Timer‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ ۳‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪ ۵ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪ ۱۰ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻭ ‪ ۱۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Camera Filter‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﺎ ‪ – ، +‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Timer‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Flash Mode‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [off‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [on‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬ﻡ‪ : off‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬ﻡ‪ : On‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Shutter Sound‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﺎ ‪ – ، +‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Resolution‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ(‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Resolution‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﺎ ‪ – ، +‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫→‪1600*1200→960*1200→1280*960→768*960‬‬
‫‪640*480→384*480‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ‪ 1280*960 ،1600*1200‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 640*480‬ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ‬‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻜﺎﺳﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Frequncy‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬ﻡ‪ : ۶۰HZ‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻴﭙﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﺩﺍ ﻭ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻱ ﺟﻨﻮﺑﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬
‫‪l‬ﻡ‪ : ۵۰HZ‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ‪) Camera‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Video Camera‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Camera Standby‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻮﮊﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - l‬ﻭ ‪ : +‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ) Zoom‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ (‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪ - ۴‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ]‪ [Video] →[ALBUM‬ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪SMF‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۴MB‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﮊﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ‪Video Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ NAVI‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Still Camera‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻓﻜﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Camera Filters‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺍﺯ ‪ +‬ﻭ – ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪Normal→ Black & White→ Negative→ Sepia→ Emboss → Sketch→ Blur→ Sharpen‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ‪Video Camera Mode‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Flash Mode‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [On‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [Off‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬ﻡ‪ : Off‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬ﻡ‪ : On‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [Frequncy‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬ﻡ‪ : ۶۰HZ‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻴﭙﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﺩﺍ ﻭ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻱ ﺟﻨﻮﺑﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬
‫‪l‬ﻡ‪ : ۵۰HZ‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Host‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ )‪ (YES‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ - ۴‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪+ ،- l‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺮﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺯﻳﺮﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ‪ popup‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ]‪ [copy‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪ : + ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺯﻳﺮﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Popup‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ )‪(Delete‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺸﺖ‪ (YES) ،‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪+،- l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺯﻳﺮﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ popup‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ]‪ [copy‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺸﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ـ ‪ :+ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺯﻳﺮﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ POPUP‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺸﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ )‪ (Delete‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۴‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺸﺖ‪ (YES) ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪YPD1 – USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ ‪USB YP –D1‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎﺀ ﺳﺨﺖﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫)ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ(‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [Setting‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ‪۱‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [Music‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ – ﻳﺎ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﺍﻙﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻨﺪﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ]‪ [Settings] → [Music‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ – ﻳﺎ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫→‪3D-User →3D-Studio → 3D-Stage →3D-Club→ Normal→Rock →House‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪Dance → Jazz→Ballad→Rhythm & Blues →Classical →User EQ‬‬
‫‪ EQ l‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ‪ EQ‬ﺁﻥ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ :DNSe‬ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺖﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Bass Enhance، 3D‬ﻭ ‪) Street Mode‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻲ( ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ 3D .‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ Stereophonic‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺯﻳﻚ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ Bass Enhance .‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ Bass‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪Street‬‬
‫‪ Mode‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻭ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻠﻮﻍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺳﻪﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ‪DNSe‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(3D‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ -‬ﻳﺎ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ ۰‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫]ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ‪[ Bass‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ‪ Bass‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ -‬ﻳﺎ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ‪ Bass‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ ۰‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۳‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ +‬ﻳﺎ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :OFF l‬ﺗﺮﺍﻙﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :On l‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﻲ‪/‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺯ ‪ -‬ﻳﺎ ‪ +‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ]‪ [Speaker‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [Earphone‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪NAVI‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﮔﻮﺷﻲ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺯﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺯﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ ،FM‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ‪ MENU‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ]‪[Settings] → [Music‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻛﻮﻻﻳﺰﺭ )‪ (EQ‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪ EQ‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ +‬ﻳﺎ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ )‪ (YES‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ +‬ﻳﺎ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ 50X، 0.75X، 1.25X :‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪1.5X‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪﺗﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ - ، +‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪WAVI‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Off→ 10sec → 30sec →1min →5min → 10min‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Music‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻔﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﻙ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ off‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ -‬ﻳﺎ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪ 10sec → 20sec- 30sec‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [Setting] → [Record‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺖ )‪(Bit Rate‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ -‬ﻳﺎ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ‪ MP۳‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪۱۹۲Kbps، kbps ۱۶۰، ۱۲۸kbps، ۹۶kbps، ۶۳kbps، :‬‬
‫‪۳۲kbps‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻚ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ )‪(Auto Sync‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﻨﻚ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ -‬ﻳﺎ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪NAVI‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﻨﻚ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﻫﻴﭻﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ،MP۳‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﻨﻚ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ ۳ ،۱‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪ ،OFF‬ﺳﻴﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪،۴ ،۳‬‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻴﻨﻚ ‪ ،۱‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﺑﺮ ‪ ۲‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﻴﭻﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﻨﻚ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ OFF‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ→ ]‪[ Setting‬‬
‫]‪ [Time Alarm‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ - ، +‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ - ، +‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ )‪ (YES‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺍﺯ ‪ -‬ﻳﺎ ‪ +‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ -‬ﻳﺎ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ - ۳‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )‪ (Yes‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﺍﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬‫ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ -‬ﻭ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ OFF‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۱۵‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۲۰‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ OFF‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [Setting] → [Display‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ )‪(Scroll Speed‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ +‬ﻳﺎ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺳﺮﻳﻊﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ )‪(Text Viewer Color‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ -‬ﻳﺎ ‪ +‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺖ )‪(Backlight Time‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪ +‬ﻳﺎ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ۳۰ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ۱ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ۵،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ۱۰ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ‪ On‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ‪ on‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ ‪ on‬ﺑﺎﻗﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﻜﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻮﺭ )‪(Clock Screen Saver‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ +‬ﻳﺎ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮﮒ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻜﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮﮒ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻜﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ۲‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ‪ +‬ﻳﺎ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ۳۰ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ۱ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ۵ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺯ – ﻭ ‪ +‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Navigation‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :List l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Navigation‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Thumbnail l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Thumbnail‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ Navigation‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Preview l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪ inpreview‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ Navigation‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪[Setting] → [Language‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ‪ -‬ﻳﺎ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [Setting] → [System‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ - ۱‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ -‬ﻳﺎ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (Yes) - ۲‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ‪ +‬ﻳﺎ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪ ۳۰ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ۱ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ۵ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ۱۰ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻭ ‪ Off‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﺍﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Off‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ[‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )‪ (On‬ﻳﺎ )‪ + ،(off‬ﻳﺎ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :OFF l‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :on l‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﻼ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﺘﻦ[‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ on‬ﻳﺎ ‪ + ،off‬ﻳﺎ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :OFF l‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ :on l‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ[‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ on‬ﻳﺎ ‪ + ،off‬ﻳﺎ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :OFF l‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﺋﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :on l‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﻼ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ on‬ﻳﺎ ‪ + ،off‬ﻳﺎ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :OFF l‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻴﭗ ﺑﻴﭗ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON l‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ‬
‫ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )‪ (Yes‬ﻳﺎ )‪ (No‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Yes l‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :No l‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )‪ (yes‬ﻳﺎ )‪ (No‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :yes l‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :No l‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [Setting] → [About‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫]ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺳﺨﺖﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻱ[‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺳﺨﺖﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ Version‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ[‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻞ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ Memory ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ[‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ Files ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺯﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪Hextris‬‬
‫‪DartGame‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪Hurdle‬‬
‫‪Pipeplus‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪/‬ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺯﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺮﺥ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺳﺨﺖﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺲﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‪/‬ﮔﻮﺷﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻪﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ EQ‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ NAVI‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻋﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ‪ Reset‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻧﻮﻙ ﺗﻴﺰ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﭙﺲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ‪ Reset‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ‪ MP۳‬ﻳﺎ ‪ WMA‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ HOLD‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻧﻮﻙ ﺗﻴﺰ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﭙﺲ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ‪ ،Reset‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ‪ Reset‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Hold‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻧﻮﻙ ﺗﻴﺰ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﭙﺲ‪ Reset ،‬ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻋﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Stop‬ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ )ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ VBR‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ ]‪ [Setting] → [Display] → [Language‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﻴﭻﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Win 98se l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Wimme/2000/XP l‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ‪ Start‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻼﺵ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
Document2
1/10/06 10:41 AM
Page 1
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺣﻘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC ۱۱۱۷۲-۳‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC ۱۳۸۱۸-۳‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻛﺪﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC ۱۱۱۷۲-۳‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC ۱۳۸۱۸-۳‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﻫﻴﭻﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC ۱۱۱۷۲-۳‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ ISO/IEC ۱۳۸۱۸-۳‬ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺰﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﻓﻊ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻏﻴﺮﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎﺀ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻣﻀﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺴﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺩﺳﺖﺍﻧﺪﺭﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﻪﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
Download PDF

advertising